]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
2011-05-09 Paul Brook <paul@codesourcery.com>
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
252b5132
RH
1404@cindex help
1405@cindex usage
1406@kindex --help
1407@item --help
1408Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
ea20a7da
CC
1410@kindex --target-help
1411@item --target-help
1412Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
2509a395
SL
1414@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1416Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1417@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex memory usage
1420@kindex --no-keep-memory
1421@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1422@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1424instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1425necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1426while linking a large executable.
1427
1428@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1430@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1431@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1432Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1436libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1437
aa713662
L
1438@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439@kindex -z muldefs
1440@item --allow-multiple-definition
1441@itemx -z muldefs
1442Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444first definition will be used.
1445
b79e8c78 1446@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1448@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1449@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1450Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1451This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
903249d7
NC
1456The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459a shared library.
1460
1461The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464@itemize @bullet
1465@item
1466A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468resolvable at load time.
1469@item
1470There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476appropriate memset function.
1477@end itemize
b79e8c78 1478
31941635
L
1479@kindex --no-undefined-version
1480@item --no-undefined-version
1481Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483will be issued instead.
1484
3e3b46e5
PB
1485@kindex --default-symver
1486@item --default-symver
1487Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1488exported symbols.
1489
1490@kindex --default-imported-symver
1491@item --default-imported-symver
1492Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1494
252b5132
RH
1495@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1497Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1498files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1500This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1501errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503inappropriate.
1504
fe7929ce
AM
1505@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
252b5132
RH
1510@kindex --no-whole-archive
1511@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1512Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1513archive files.
1514
1515@cindex output file after errors
1516@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517@item --noinhibit-exec
1518Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
0a9c1c8e
CD
1523@kindex -nostdlib
1524@item -nostdlib
1525Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
252b5132 1529@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1532@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1534@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1535object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1537should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543@end ifclear
1544
36af4a4e
JJ
1545@kindex -pie
1546@kindex --pic-executable
1547@item -pie
1548@itemx --pic-executable
1549@cindex position independent executables
1550Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1553address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1554normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex -qmagic
1558@item -qmagic
1559This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561@kindex -Qy
1562@item -Qy
1563This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565@kindex --relax
1566@cindex synthesizing linker
1567@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1568@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1569@item --relax
28d5f677 1570@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1571An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1572@ifset GENERIC
1573This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574@end ifset
1575@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1576@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1577@end ifset
1578@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1579@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1580@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1581@ifset XTENSA
1582@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1584@ifset M68HC11
1585@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1587@ifset POWERPC
1588@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589@end ifset
252b5132 1590
28d5f677
NC
1591On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1596
1597On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1600This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
1605On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606but ignored.
1607@end ifset
1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex retaining specified symbols
1613@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1615@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1617Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621(such as VxWorks)
1622@end ifset
1623where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624run-time memory.
1625
1626@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1633@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1635@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1636Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1637linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1638arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1639them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1640also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1642@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1643ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
ff5dcc92 1646The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1647SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1648@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1652file systems.
252b5132 1653
ff5dcc92 1654For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1655followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1656the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1657@end ifset
1658
1659@ifset GENERIC
1660@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1661@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1663When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665of the input files.
1666
1667When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1670explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1671specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1672@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1673either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674appearing multiple times.
1675
28c309a2
NC
1676This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679runtime linker would do.
1680
252b5132 1681The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1682libraries:
252b5132
RH
1683@enumerate
1684@item
ff5dcc92 1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1686@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1687Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1691at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1694@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1695On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1698@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1699On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ec4eb78a
L
1705For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709@item
252b5132
RH
1710The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711@item
1712For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714@end enumerate
1715
1716If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717warning and continue with the link.
1718@end ifset
1719
1720@kindex -shared
1721@kindex -Bshareable
1722@item -shared
1723@itemx -Bshareable
1724@cindex shared libraries
1725Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1727shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1728undefined symbols in the link.
1729
252b5132 1730@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1731@item --sort-common
1732@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1734This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1740
2509a395
SL
1741@kindex --sort-section=name
1742@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1743This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744patterns in the linker script.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1748This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749patterns in the linker script.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1752@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1753Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1754each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1756
1757@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1759Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1760output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1761This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1762certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1768many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@kindex --stats
1771@item --stats
1772Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773as execution time and memory usage.
1774
2509a395 1775@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1776@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@kindex --traditional-format
1782@cindex traditional format
1783@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1784For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1786use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1789For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1790symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1793trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1794combine duplicate entries.
1795
2509a395
SL
1796@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1798Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801line.
1802@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
2509a395
SL
1808@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1811@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1812@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1816@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1817
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1820@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
560e09e9
NC
1824@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829@table @samp
1830@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1831Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1832
1833@item report-all
da8bce14 1834Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1835
1836@item ignore-in-object-files
1837Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845command line.
1846@end table
1847
1848The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853can change this to a warning.
1854
1715a13c
L
1855@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1856@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1857@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1858@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1859Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1860supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1861the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1862argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1863
1864@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1865@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1866@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1867Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1868used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1869about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1870is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1871see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1872use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1873symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1874@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1875
7ce691ae 1876@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1877@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1878@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1879@item --warn-common
1880Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1881a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1882but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1883you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1884Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1885warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1886
1887There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1888
1889@table @samp
1890@item int i = 1;
1891A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1892file.
1893
1894@item extern int i;
1895An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1896There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1897variable somewhere.
1898
1899@item int i;
1900A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1901variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1902The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1903single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1904size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1905a definition of the same variable.
1906@end table
1907
1908The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1909Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1910just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1911encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1912a common symbol.
1913
1914@enumerate
1915@item
1916Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1917definition for the symbol.
1918@smallexample
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1920 overridden by definition
1921@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1922@end smallexample
1923
1924@item
1925Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1926the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1927except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1928@smallexample
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1930 overriding common
1931@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1932@end smallexample
1933
1934@item
1935Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1936@smallexample
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1938 of `@var{symbol}'
1939@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1940@end smallexample
1941
1942@item
1943Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1944@smallexample
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1946 overridden by larger common
1947@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1948@end smallexample
1949
1950@item
1951Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1952the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1953encountered in a different order.
1954@smallexample
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1956 overriding smaller common
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1958@end smallexample
1959@end enumerate
1960
1961@kindex --warn-constructors
1962@item --warn-constructors
1963Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1964object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1965detect the use of global constructors.
1966
1967@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1968@item --warn-multiple-gp
1969Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1970This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1971Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1972section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1973of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1974base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1975base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1976bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1977large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1978values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1979option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1980
1981@kindex --warn-once
1982@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1983@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1984@item --warn-once
1985Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1986which refers to it.
1987
1988@kindex --warn-section-align
1989@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1990@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1991@item --warn-section-align
1992Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1993alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1994The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1995is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1996the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1997
8fdd7217
NC
1998@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1999@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2000Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2001
a0c402a5
L
2002@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2003@item --warn-alternate-em
2004Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2005
560e09e9
NC
2006@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2008If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2009@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2010This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2011
2012@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2013@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2014This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2015it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2016
252b5132
RH
2017@kindex --whole-archive
2018@cindex including an entire archive
2019@item --whole-archive
2020For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2021@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2022in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2023files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2024library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2025library. This option may be used more than once.
2026
7ec229ce 2027Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2028about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2029Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2030list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2031your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2032
2509a395
SL
2033@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2034@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2035Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2036@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2037undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2038@var{symbol}.
2039
2040This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2041wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2042wishes to call the system function, it should call
2043@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2044
2045Here is a trivial example:
2046
2047@smallexample
2048void *
cc2f008e 2049__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2050@{
cc2f008e 2051 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2052 return __real_malloc (c);
2053@}
2054@end smallexample
2055
ff5dcc92 2056If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2057all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2058instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2059call the real @code{malloc} function.
2060
2061You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2062links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2063you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2064file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2065call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2066
6aa29e7b
JJ
2067@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2068@item --eh-frame-hdr
2069Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2070@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2071
6c1439be
L
2072@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2073@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2074@item --enable-new-dtags
2075@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2076This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2077systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2078@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2079If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2080created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2081those options are only available for ELF systems.
2082
2d643429 2083@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2084@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2085Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2086close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2087time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2088increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2089value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2090
fdc90cb4
JJ
2091@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2092@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2093Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2094@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2095new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2096the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2097hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2098
35835446
JR
2099@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2100@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2101This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2102linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2103for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2104about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2105
4f9c04f7 2106Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21071021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2108run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2109has been used.
2110
2111The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2112enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2113
c0065db7
RM
2114@kindex --build-id
2115@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2116@item --build-id
2117@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2118Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2119The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2120file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2121@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2122parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2123@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2124@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2125an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2126characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2127omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2128
2129The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2130that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2131unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2132to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2133file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2134string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2135
2136Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2137@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2138@end table
2139
0285c67d
NC
2140@c man end
2141
36f63dca 2142@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2143
0285c67d
NC
2144@c man begin OPTIONS
2145
ff5dcc92 2146The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2147the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2148normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2149use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2150@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2151like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2152symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2153object file).
2154
2155In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2156support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2157PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2158values by either a space or an equals sign.
2159
ff5dcc92 2160@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2161
2162@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2163@item --add-stdcall-alias
2164If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2165as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2166[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --base-file
2169@item --base-file @var{file}
2170Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2171addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2172@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2173[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2174
2175@kindex --dll
2176@item --dll
2177Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2178@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2179file.
bb10df36 2180[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2181
88183869
DK
2182@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2183@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2184@item --enable-long-section-names
2185@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2186The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2187the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2188for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2189fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2190to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2191allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2192disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2193generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2194as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2195with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2196GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2197information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2198option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2199section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2200when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2201image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2202[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2203
252b5132
RH
2204@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2207@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2208If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2209do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2210only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2211resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2212undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2213@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2214to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2215warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2216import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2217to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2218feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2219@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2220mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2221[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2222
522f09cd
KT
2223@kindex --leading-underscore
2224@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2225@item --leading-underscore
2226@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2227For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2228in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2229disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2230
252b5132
RH
2231@cindex DLLs, creating
2232@kindex --export-all-symbols
2233@item --export-all-symbols
2234If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2235be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2236otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2237explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2238attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2239option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2240@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2241@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2242exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2243re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2244such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2245@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2246@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2247Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2248not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2249extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2250(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2251These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2252@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2253@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2254@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2255@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2256[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2257
2258@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2259@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2260Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2261exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2262[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2263
2927aaca
NC
2264@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2265@item --exclude-all-symbols
2266Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2267[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2268
252b5132
RH
2269@kindex --file-alignment
2270@item --file-alignment
2271Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2272file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2273512.
bb10df36 2274[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2275
2276@cindex heap size
2277@kindex --heap
2278@item --heap @var{reserve}
2279@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2280Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2281to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2282committed.
bb10df36 2283[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2284
2285@cindex image base
2286@kindex --image-base
2287@item --image-base @var{value}
2288Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2289the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2290is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2291your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2292other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2293for dlls.
bb10df36 2294[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2295
2296@kindex --kill-at
2297@item --kill-at
2298If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2299symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2300[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2301
26d2d8a2
BF
2302@kindex --large-address-aware
2303@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2304If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2305header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2306greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2307or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2308section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2309[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2310
252b5132
RH
2311@kindex --major-image-version
2312@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2313Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2314[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2315
2316@kindex --major-os-version
2317@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2318Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2322@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2323Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2324[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2325
2326@kindex --minor-image-version
2327@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2328Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2329[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2330
2331@kindex --minor-os-version
2332@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2333Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2334[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2335
2336@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2337@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2338Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2340
2341@cindex DEF files, creating
2342@cindex DLLs, creating
2343@kindex --output-def
2344@item --output-def @var{file}
2345The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2346file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2347(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2348library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2349automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2350[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2351
b044cda1
CW
2352@cindex DLLs, creating
2353@kindex --out-implib
2354@item --out-implib @var{file}
2355The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2356import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2357import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2358may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2359makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2360creation step.
bb10df36 2361[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2362
2363@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2364@item --enable-auto-image-base
2365Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2366using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2367from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2368collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2369avoided.
bb10df36 2370[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2371
2372@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2373@item --disable-auto-image-base
2374Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2375user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2376default.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2378
2379@cindex DLLs, linking to
2380@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2381@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2382When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2383search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2384@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2385between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2386uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2387@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2388[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2389
2390@kindex --enable-auto-import
2391@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2392Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2393DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2394building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2395'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2396to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2397specification published by Microsoft.
2398
e2a83dd0
NC
2399Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2400data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2401placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2402around a problem with consts that is described here:
2403http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2404
4d8907ac
DS
2405Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2406see this message:
0d888aac 2407
ece2d90e 2408"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2409documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2410
ece2d90e
NC
2411This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2412ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2413allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2414fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2415constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2416multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2417this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2418of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2419the warning, and exit.
2420
2421There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2422data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2423
2fa9fc65
NC
2424One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2425of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2426this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2427
c0065db7
RM
2428A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2429that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2430there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2431a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2432
2433@example
2434extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2435extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2436 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2437@end example
2438
2439or
2440
2441@example
2442extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2443extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2444 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2445@end example
2446
c0065db7 2447For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2448is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2449
2450@example
2451extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2452extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2453 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2454@end example
2455
c406afaf
NC
2456or
2457
2458@example
2459extern long long extern_ll;
2460extern_ll -->
2461 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2462@end example
2463
2fa9fc65 2464A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2465'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2466@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2467requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2468building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2469merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2470between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2471constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2472
2473Original:
2474@example
2475--foo.h
2476extern int arr[];
2477--foo.c
2478#include "foo.h"
2479void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2480 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2481@}
2482@end example
2483
2484Solution 1:
2485@example
2486--foo.h
2487extern int arr[];
2488--foo.c
2489#include "foo.h"
2490void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2491 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2492 volatile int *parr = arr;
2493 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2494@}
2495@end example
2496
2497Solution 2:
2498@example
2499--foo.h
2500/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2501#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2502 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2503#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2504#else
2505#define FOO_IMPORT
2506#endif
2507extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2508--foo.c
2509#include "foo.h"
2510void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2511 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2512@}
2513@end example
2514
c0065db7 2515A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2516library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2517for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2518functions).
bb10df36 2519[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2520
2521@kindex --disable-auto-import
2522@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2523Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2524@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2526
2fa9fc65
NC
2527@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2529If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2530that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2531a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2532environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2534
2535@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2537Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2538DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2540
b044cda1
CW
2541@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2543Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2544[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2545
252b5132
RH
2546@kindex --section-alignment
2547@item --section-alignment
2548Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2549addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2550[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2551
2552@cindex stack size
2553@kindex --stack
2554@item --stack @var{reserve}
2555@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2556Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2557to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2558committed.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2560
2561@kindex --subsystem
2562@item --subsystem @var{which}
2563@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2564@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2565Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2566legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2567@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2568the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2569@var{which}.
bb10df36 2570[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2571
2f563b51
DK
2572The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2573of the PE file header:
2574[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2575
2576@kindex --dynamicbase
2577@item --dynamicbase
2578The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2579randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2580Vista for i386 PE targets.
2581
2582@kindex --forceinteg
2583@item --forceinteg
2584Code integrity checks are enforced.
2585
2586@kindex --nxcompat
2587@item --nxcompat
2588The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2589This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2590
2591@kindex --no-isolation
2592@item --no-isolation
2593Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2594
2595@kindex --no-seh
2596@item --no-seh
2597The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2598this image.
2599
2600@kindex --no-bind
2601@item --no-bind
2602Do not bind this image.
2603
2604@kindex --wdmdriver
2605@item --wdmdriver
2606The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2607
2608@kindex --tsaware
2609@item --tsaware
2610The image is Terminal Server aware.
2611
252b5132
RH
2612@end table
2613
0285c67d
NC
2614@c man end
2615
ac145307
BS
2616@ifset C6X
2617@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2618
2619@c man begin OPTIONS
2620
2621The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2622libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2623all executables use an index of 0.
2624
2625@table @gcctabopt
2626
2627@kindex --dsbt-size
2628@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2629This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2630or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2631entries.
2632
2633@kindex --dsbt-index
2634@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2635This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2636to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2637executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2638@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2639
2640@end table
2641
2642@c man end
2643@end ifset
2644
93fd0973
SC
2645@ifset M68HC11
2646@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2647
2648@c man begin OPTIONS
2649
2650The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2651memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2652
2653@table @gcctabopt
2654
2655@kindex --no-trampoline
2656@item --no-trampoline
2657This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2658is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2659instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2660
2661@kindex --bank-window
2662@item --bank-window @var{name}
2663This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2664the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2665The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2666paging and addresses within the memory window.
2667
2668@end table
2669
2670@c man end
2671@end ifset
2672
7fb9f789
NC
2673@ifset M68K
2674@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2675
2676@c man begin OPTIONS
2677
2678The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2679when linking for 68K targets.
2680
2681@table @gcctabopt
2682
2683@kindex --got
2684@item --got=@var{type}
2685This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2686@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2687@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2688Info entry for @file{ld}.
2689
2690@end table
2691
2692@c man end
2693@end ifset
2694
252b5132
RH
2695@ifset UsesEnvVars
2696@node Environment
2697@section Environment Variables
2698
0285c67d
NC
2699@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2700
560e09e9 2701You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2702@ifclear SingleFormat
2703@code{GNUTARGET},
2704@end ifclear
2705@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2706
36f63dca 2707@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2708@kindex GNUTARGET
2709@cindex default input format
2710@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2711use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2712of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2713@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2714of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2715attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2716this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2717there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2718object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2719BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2720in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2721@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2722
2723@kindex LDEMULATION
2724@cindex default emulation
2725@cindex emulation, default
2726@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2727@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2728behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2729available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2730the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2731variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2732linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2733
2734@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2735@cindex demangling, default
2736Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2737@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2738default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2739a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2740may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2741options.
2742
0285c67d
NC
2743@c man end
2744@end ifset
2745
252b5132
RH
2746@node Scripts
2747@chapter Linker Scripts
2748
2749@cindex scripts
2750@cindex linker scripts
2751@cindex command files
2752Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2753written in the linker command language.
2754
2755The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2756the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2757the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2758more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2759direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2760described below.
2761
2762The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2763yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2764linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2765to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2766such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2767
2768You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2769line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2770default linker script.
2771
2772You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2773to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2774Linker Scripts}.
2775
2776@menu
2777* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2778* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2779* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2780* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2781* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2782* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2783* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2784* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2785* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2786* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2787* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2788@end menu
2789
2790@node Basic Script Concepts
2791@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2792@cindex linker script concepts
2793We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2794describe the linker script language.
2795
2796The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2797file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2798@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2799The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2800purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2801among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2802section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2803in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2804
2805Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2806also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2807contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2808the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2809A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2810area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2811loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2812which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2813of debugging information.
2814
2815Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2816first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2817the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2818@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2819section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2820same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2821is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2822(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2823based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2824RAM address would be the VMA.
2825
2826You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2827program with the @samp{-h} option.
2828
2829Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2830@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2831has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2832information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2833will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2834static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2835referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2836
2837You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2838program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2839option.
2840
2841@node Script Format
2842@section Linker Script Format
2843@cindex linker script format
2844Linker scripts are text files.
2845
2846You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2847either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2848symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2849generally ignored.
2850
2851Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2852If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2853otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2854double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2855file name.
2856
2857You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2858@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2859to whitespace.
2860
2861@node Simple Example
2862@section Simple Linker Script Example
2863@cindex linker script example
2864@cindex example of linker script
2865Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2866
2867The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2868@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2869memory layout of the output file.
2870
2871The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2872describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2873code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2874@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2875Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2876your input files.
2877
2878For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28790x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2880linker script which will do that:
2881@smallexample
2882SECTIONS
2883@{
2884 . = 0x10000;
2885 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2886 . = 0x8000000;
2887 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2888 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2889@}
2890@end smallexample
2891
2892You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2893followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2894descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2895
252b5132
RH
2896The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2897sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2898counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2899other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2900current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2901incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2902@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2903
2904The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2905required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2906after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2907which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2908wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2909means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2910
2911Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2912@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2913@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2914
2915The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2916the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2917at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2918output section, the value of the location counter will be
2919@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2920effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2921immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2922
2923The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2924alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2925example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2926sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2927may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2928sections.
2929
2930That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2931
2932@node Simple Commands
2933@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2934@cindex linker script simple commands
2935In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2936
2937@menu
2938* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2939* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2940@ifclear SingleFormat
2941* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2942@end ifclear
2943
4a93e180 2944* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2945* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2946@end menu
2947
2948@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2949@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2950@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2951@cindex start of execution
2952@cindex first instruction
2953@cindex entry point
2954The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2955point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2956entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2957@smallexample
2958ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2959@end smallexample
2960
2961There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2962entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2963stopping when one of them succeeds:
2964@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2965@item
252b5132 2966the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2967@item
252b5132 2968the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2969@item
3ab904c4
NC
2970the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2971targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2972check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2973@item
252b5132 2974the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2975@item
252b5132
RH
2976The address @code{0}.
2977@end itemize
2978
2979@node File Commands
36f63dca 2980@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2981@cindex linker script file commands
2982Several linker script commands deal with files.
2983
2984@table @code
2985@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2986@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2987@cindex including a linker script
2988Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2989be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2990with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
299110 levels deep.
2992
4006703d
NS
2993You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2994@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2995
252b5132
RH
2996@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2997@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2998@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2999@cindex input files in linker scripts
3000@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3001@cindex linker script input object files
3002The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3003in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3004
3005For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3006a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3007then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3008
3009In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3010script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3011
e3f2db7f
AO
3012In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3013with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3014located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3015for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3016open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3017linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3018description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3019
ff5dcc92 3020If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3021name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3022@samp{-l}.
3023
3024When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3025files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3026script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3027
3028@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3029@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3030@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3031@cindex grouping input files
3032The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3033files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3034new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3035in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3036
b717d30e
JJ
3037@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3038@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3039@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3040This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3041commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3042as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3043with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3044when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3045@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3046and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3047setting afterwards.
3048
252b5132
RH
3049@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3050@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3051@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3052The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3053@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3054@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3055Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3056precedence.
3057
3058You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3059output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3060
3061@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3062@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3063@cindex library search path in linker script
3064@cindex archive search path in linker script
3065@cindex search path in linker script
3066The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3067@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3068@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3069on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3070are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3071the command line option are searched first.
3072
3073@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3074@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3075@cindex first input file
3076The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3077that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3078though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3079when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3080first file.
3081@end table
3082
3083@ifclear SingleFormat
3084@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3085@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3086A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3087
3088@table @code
3089@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3090@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3091@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3092@cindex output file format in linker script
3093The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3094output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3095exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3096(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3097line option takes precedence.
3098
3099You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3100formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3101This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3102desired endianness.
3103
3104If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3105will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3106output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3107used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3108
3109For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3110command:
3111@smallexample
3112OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3113@end smallexample
3114This says that the default format for the output file is
3115@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3116option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3117format.
3118
3119@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3120@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3121@cindex input file format in linker script
3122The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3123files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3124This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3125(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3126is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3127command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3128@end table
3129@end ifclear
3130
4a93e180
NC
3131@node REGION_ALIAS
3132@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3133@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3134@cindex region alias
3135@cindex region names
3136
3137Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3138@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3139
3140@smallexample
3141REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3142@end smallexample
3143
3144The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3145memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3146to memory regions. An example follows.
3147
3148Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3149memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3150that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3151non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3152access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3153read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3154sections:
3155
3156@itemize @bullet
3157@item
3158@code{.text} program code;
3159@item
3160@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3161@item
3162@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3163@item
3164@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3165@end itemize
3166
3167The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3168part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3169output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3170systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3171@code{C}:
3172@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3173@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3174@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3175@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3176@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3177@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3178@end multitable
3179The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3180loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3181the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3182the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3183
3184The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3185includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3186memory layout:
3187@smallexample
3188INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3189
3190SECTIONS
3191 @{
3192 .text :
3193 @{
3194 *(.text)
3195 @} > REGION_TEXT
3196 .rodata :
3197 @{
3198 *(.rodata)
3199 rodata_end = .;
3200 @} > REGION_RODATA
3201 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3202 @{
3203 data_start = .;
3204 *(.data)
3205 @} > REGION_DATA
3206 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3207 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3208 .bss :
3209 @{
3210 *(.bss)
3211 @} > REGION_BSS
3212 @}
3213@end smallexample
3214
3215Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3216regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3217variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3218@table @code
3219@item A
3220Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3221@smallexample
3222MEMORY
3223 @{
3224 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3225 @}
3226
3227REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3228REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3229REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3230REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3231@end smallexample
3232@item B
3233Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3234into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3235@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3236@smallexample
3237MEMORY
3238 @{
3239 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3240 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3241 @}
3242
3243REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3244REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3245REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3246REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3247@end smallexample
3248@item C
3249Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3250@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3251initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3252system start into the @code{RAM}.
3253@smallexample
3254MEMORY
3255 @{
3256 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3257 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3258 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3259 @}
3260
3261REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3262REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3263REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3264REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3265@end smallexample
3266@end table
3267
3268It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3269@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3270necessary:
3271@smallexample
3272#include <string.h>
3273
3274extern char data_start [];
3275extern char data_size [];
3276extern char data_load_start [];
3277
3278void copy_data(void)
3279@{
3280 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3281 @{
3282 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3283 @}
3284@}
3285@end smallexample
3286
252b5132 3287@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3288@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3289There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3290
3291@table @code
3292@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3293@kindex ASSERT
3294@cindex assertion in linker script
3295Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3296with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3297
3298@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3299@kindex EXTERN
3300@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3301Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3302symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3303modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3304each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3305command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3306
3307@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3308@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3309@cindex common allocation in linker script
3310This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3311to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3312output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3313
4818e05f
AM
3314@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3315@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3316@cindex common allocation in linker script
3317This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3318command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3319to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3320
53d25da6
AM
3321@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3322@kindex INSERT
3323@cindex insert user script into default script
3324This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3325augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3326inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3327@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3328default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3329sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3330linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3331insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3332linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3333default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3334of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3335to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3336is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3337
3338@smallexample
3339SECTIONS
3340@{
3341 OVERLAY :
3342 @{
3343 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3344 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3345 @}
3346@}
3347INSERT AFTER .text;
3348@end smallexample
3349
252b5132
RH
3350@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3351@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3352@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3353This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3354references among certain output sections.
3355
3356In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3357using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3358will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3359errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3360a function defined in the other section.
3361
3362The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3363@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3364an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3365@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3366names.
3367
3368@ifclear SingleFormat
3369@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3370@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3371@cindex machine architecture
3372@cindex architecture
3373Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3374of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3375architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3376the @samp{-f} option.
3377@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3378
3379@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3380@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3381This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3382@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3383in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3384@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3385@end table
3386
3387@node Assignments
3388@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3389@cindex assignment in scripts
3390@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3391@cindex variables, defining
3392You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3393the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3394
3395@menu
3396* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3397* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3398* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3399* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3400@end menu
3401
3402@node Simple Assignments
3403@subsection Simple Assignments
3404
3405You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3406
3407@table @code
3408@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3409@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3410@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3411@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3412@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3413@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3414@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3415@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3416@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3417@end table
3418
3419The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3420@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3421defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3422
3423The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3424may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3425
3426The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3427
3428Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3429
3430You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3431statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3432section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3433
3434The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3435expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3436
3437Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3438assignments may be used:
3439
3440@smallexample
3441floating_point = 0;
3442SECTIONS
3443@{
3444 .text :
3445 @{
3446 *(.text)
3447 _etext = .;
3448 @}
156e34dd 3449 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3450 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3451@}
3452@end smallexample
3453@noindent
3454In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3455zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3456the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3457defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3458upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3459
3460@node PROVIDE
3461@subsection PROVIDE
3462@cindex PROVIDE
3463In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3464only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3465the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3466@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3467@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3468@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3469@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3470@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3471
3472Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3473@smallexample
3474SECTIONS
3475@{
3476 .text :
3477 @{
3478 *(.text)
3479 _etext = .;
3480 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3481 @}
3482@}
3483@end smallexample
3484
3485In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3486underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3487the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3488underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3489If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3490linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3491
7af8e998
L
3492@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3493@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3494@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3495Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3496hidden and won't be exported.
3497
73ae6183
NC
3498@node Source Code Reference
3499@subsection Source Code Reference
3500
3501Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3502intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3503a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3504symbol that does not have a value.
3505
3506Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3507transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3508stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3509prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3510mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3511of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3512variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3513linker script variable might be referred to as:
3514
3515@smallexample
3516 extern int foo;
3517@end smallexample
3518
3519But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3520
3521@smallexample
3522 _foo = 1000;
3523@end smallexample
3524
3525In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3526transformation has taken place.
3527
3528When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3529things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3530in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3531second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3532table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3533contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3534value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3535
3536@smallexample
3537 int foo = 1000;
3538@end smallexample
3539
3540creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3541holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3542number 1000 is initially stored.
3543
3544When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3545first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3546memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3547So:
3548
3549@smallexample
3550 foo = 1;
3551@end smallexample
3552
3553looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3554associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3555address. Whereas:
3556
3557@smallexample
3558 int * a = & foo;
3559@end smallexample
3560
3561looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3562and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3563the variable @samp{a}.
3564
3565Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3566the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3567an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3568
3569@smallexample
3570 foo = 1000;
3571@end smallexample
3572
3573creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3574the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3575address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3576linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3577access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3578
3579Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3580you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3581use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3582section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3583linker script contains these declarations:
3584
3585@smallexample
3586@group
3587 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3588 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3589 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3590@end group
3591@end smallexample
3592
3593Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3594
3595@smallexample
3596@group
3597 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3598
73ae6183
NC
3599 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3600@end group
3601@end smallexample
3602
3603Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3604
252b5132 3605@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3606@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3607@kindex SECTIONS
3608The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3609into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3610
3611The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3612@smallexample
3613SECTIONS
3614@{
3615 @var{sections-command}
3616 @var{sections-command}
3617 @dots{}
3618@}
3619@end smallexample
3620
3621Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3622
3623@itemize @bullet
3624@item
3625an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3626@item
3627a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3628@item
3629an output section description
3630@item
3631an overlay description
3632@end itemize
3633
3634The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3635@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3636those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3637understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3638the layout of the output file.
3639
3640Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3641below.
3642
3643If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3644linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3645section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3646input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3647example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3648in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3649
3650@menu
3651* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3652* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3653* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3654* Input Section:: Input section description
3655* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3656* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3657* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3658* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3659* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3660@end menu
3661
3662@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3663@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3664The full description of an output section looks like this:
3665@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3666@group
7e7d5768 3667@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3668 [AT(@var{lma})]
3669 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3670 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3671 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3672 @{
3673 @var{output-section-command}
3674 @var{output-section-command}
3675 @dots{}
562d3460 3676 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3677@end group
3678@end smallexample
3679
3680Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3681
3682The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3683name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3684The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3685
3686Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3687
3688@itemize @bullet
3689@item
3690a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3691@item
3692an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3693@item
3694data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3695@item
3696a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3697@end itemize
3698
3699@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3700@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3701@cindex name, section
3702@cindex section name
3703The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3704meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3705support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3706must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3707example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3708output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3709names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3710quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3711characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3712commas must be quoted.
3713
3714The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3715Discarding}.
3716
3717@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3718@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3719@cindex address, section
3720@cindex section address
3721The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3722address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3723is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3724
3725If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3726section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3727to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3728alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3729contained within the output section.
3730
3731The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3732
3733@itemize @bullet
3734@item
3735If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3736is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3737in that region.
3738
3739@item
3740If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3741regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3742section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3743be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3744
3745@item
3746If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3747the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3748counter.
3749@end itemize
3750
3751@noindent
3752For example:
3753
252b5132
RH
3754@smallexample
3755.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3756@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3757
252b5132
RH
3758@noindent
3759and
ea5cae92 3760
252b5132
RH
3761@smallexample
3762.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3763@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3764
252b5132
RH
3765@noindent
3766are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3767@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3768counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3769counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3770input sections.
252b5132
RH
3771
3772The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3773For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3774so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3775do something like this:
3776@smallexample
3777.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3778@end smallexample
3779@noindent
3780This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3781aligned upward to the specified value.
3782
3783Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3784location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3785sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3786
3787@node Input Section
36f63dca 3788@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3789@cindex input sections
3790@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3791The most common output section command is an input section description.
3792
3793The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3794You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3795in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3796map the input files into your memory layout.
3797
3798@menu
3799* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3800* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3801* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3802* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3803* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3804@end menu
3805
3806@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3807@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3808@cindex input section basics
3809An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3810by a list of section names in parentheses.
3811
3812The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3813describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3814
3815The most common input section description is to include all input
3816sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3817include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3818@smallexample
3819*(.text)
3820@end smallexample
3821@noindent
18625d54
CM
3822Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3823of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3824match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3825example:
252b5132 3826@smallexample
b4346c09 3827*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3828@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3829will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3830@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3831
3832There are two ways to include more than one section:
3833@smallexample
3834*(.text .rdata)
3835*(.text) *(.rdata)
3836@end smallexample
3837@noindent
3838The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3839@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3840first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3841they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3842@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3843@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3844
3845You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3846You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3847needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3848@smallexample
3849data.o(.data)
3850@end smallexample
3851
967928e9
AM
3852You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3853matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3854with no whitespace around the colon.
3855
3856@table @samp
3857@item archive:file
3858matches file within archive
3859@item archive:
3860matches the whole archive
3861@item :file
3862matches file but not one in an archive
3863@end table
3864
3865Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3866wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3867single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3868@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3869within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3870also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3871other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3872from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3873command.
3874
252b5132
RH
3875If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3876the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3877commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3878@smallexample
3879data.o
3880@end smallexample
3881
967928e9
AM
3882When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3883and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3884characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3885name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3886did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3887though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3888@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3889the archive search path.
3890
3891@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3892@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3893@cindex input section wildcards
3894@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3895@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3896@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3897In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3898name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3899
3900The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3901pattern for the file name.
3902
3903The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3904
3905@table @samp
3906@item *
3907matches any number of characters
3908@item ?
3909matches any single character
3910@item [@var{chars}]
3911matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3912character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3913@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3914@item \
3915quotes the following character
3916@end table
3917
3918When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3919will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3920Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3921exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3922@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3923a @samp{/} character.
3924
3925File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3926specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3927does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3928
3929If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3930appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3931will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3932sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3933@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3934@smallexample
3935.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3936.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3937@end smallexample
3938
bcaa7b3e 3939@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3940Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3941in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3942this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3943pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3944@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3945into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3946
bcaa7b3e
L
3947@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3948@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3949difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3950ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3951
02ecc8e9
L
3952@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3953@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3954difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3955ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3956encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3957
bcaa7b3e
L
3958@cindex SORT
3959@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3960
3961When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3962can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3963
3964@enumerate
3965@item
3966@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3967It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3968sections have the same name.
3969@item
3970@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3971It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3972sections have the same alignment.
3973@item
c0065db7 3974@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3975treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3976@item
3977@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3978is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3979@item
3980All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3981@end enumerate
3982
3983When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3984section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3985takes precedence over the command line option.
3986
3987If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3988command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3989treated as nested sorting command.
3990
3991@enumerate
3992@item
3993@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3994@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3995@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3996@item
3997@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3998@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3999@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4000@end enumerate
4001
4002If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4003command line option will be ignored.
4004
252b5132
RH
4005If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4006@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4007precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4008
4009This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4010files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4011sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4012The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4013with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4014linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4015@smallexample
4016@group
4017SECTIONS @{
4018 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4019 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4020 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4021 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4022@}
4023@end group
4024@end smallexample
4025
4026@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4027@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4028@cindex common symbol placement
4029@cindex uninitialized data placement
4030A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4031file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4032linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4033named @samp{COMMON}.
4034
4035You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4036other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4037particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4038input files are placed in another section.
4039
4040In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4041@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4042@smallexample
4043.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4044@end smallexample
4045
4046@cindex scommon section
4047@cindex small common symbols
4048Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4049example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4050symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4051different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4052the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4053symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4054to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4055locations.
4056
4057@cindex [COMMON]
4058You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4059notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4060@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4061
4062@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4063@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4064@cindex KEEP
4065@cindex garbage collection
4066When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4067it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4068This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4069with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4070@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4071
4072@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4073@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4074The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4075to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4076start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4077@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4078follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4079@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4080@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4081All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4082files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4083
4084@smallexample
4085@group
4086SECTIONS @{
4087 outputa 0x10000 :
4088 @{
4089 all.o
4090 foo.o (.input1)
4091 @}
36f63dca
NC
4092@end group
4093@group
252b5132
RH
4094 outputb :
4095 @{
4096 foo.o (.input2)
4097 foo1.o (.input1)
4098 @}
36f63dca
NC
4099@end group
4100@group
252b5132
RH
4101 outputc :
4102 @{
4103 *(.input1)
4104 *(.input2)
4105 @}
4106@}
4107@end group
a1ab1d2a 4108@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4109
4110@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4111@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4112@cindex data
4113@cindex section data
4114@cindex output section data
4115@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4116@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4117@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4118@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4119@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4120You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4121@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4122an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4123parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4124value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4125counter.
4126
4127The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4128store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4129bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4130stored.
4131
4132For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4133of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4134@smallexample
4135BYTE(1)
4136LONG(addr)
4137@end smallexample
4138
4139When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4140same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4141target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4142@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4143@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4144
4145If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4146which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4147When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4148true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4149endianness of the first input object file.
4150
36f63dca 4151Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4152between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4153@smallexample
4154SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4155@end smallexample
4156whereas this will work:
4157@smallexample
4158SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4159@end smallexample
4160
252b5132
RH
4161@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4162@cindex holes, filling
4163@cindex unspecified memory
4164You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4165current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4166otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4167gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4168with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4169necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4170point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4171than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4172different parts of an output section.
4173
4174This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4175value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4176@smallexample
563e308f 4177FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4178@end smallexample
4179
4180The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4181section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4182part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4183entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4184precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4185expression.
252b5132
RH
4186
4187@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4188@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4189There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4190commands.
4191
4192@table @code
4193@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4194@cindex input filename symbols
4195@cindex filename symbols
4196@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4197The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4198The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4199file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4200the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4201
4202This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4203normally used for any other object file format.
4204
4205@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4206@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4207@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4208@item CONSTRUCTORS
4209When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4210unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4211destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4212arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4213automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4214For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4215linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4216@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4217ignored for other object file formats.
4218
4219The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4220constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4221Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4222the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4223first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4224of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4225compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4226formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4227@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4228the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4229destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4230@code{exit}.
4231
4232For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4233arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4234addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4235and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4236linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4237runtime code expects to see.
4238
4239@smallexample
4240 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4241 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4242 *(.ctors)
4243 LONG(0)
4244 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4245 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4246 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4247 *(.dtors)
4248 LONG(0)
4249 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4250@end smallexample
4251
4252If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4253which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4254are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4255are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4256command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4257@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4258@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4259@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4260
4261Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4262and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4263need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4264scripts.
4265
4266@end table
4267
4268@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4269@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4270@cindex discarding sections
4271@cindex sections, discarding
4272@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4273The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4274for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4275be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4276@smallexample
49c13adb 4277.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4278@end smallexample
4279@noindent
4280will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4281@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4282sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4283space in an output section will also create the output section.
4284
a0976ea4 4285The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4286on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4287symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4288the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4289section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4290
4291@cindex /DISCARD/
4292The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4293input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4294section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4295
4296@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4297@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4298@cindex output section attributes
4299We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4300like this:
0c71d759 4301
252b5132 4302@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4303@group
7e7d5768 4304@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4305 [AT(@var{lma})]
4306 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4307 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4308 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4309 @{
4310 @var{output-section-command}
4311 @var{output-section-command}
4312 @dots{}
562d3460 4313 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4314@end group
4315@end smallexample
0c71d759 4316
252b5132
RH
4317We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4318@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4319remaining section attributes.
4320
a1ab1d2a 4321@menu
252b5132
RH
4322* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4323* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4324* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4325* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4326* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4327* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4328* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4329* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4330@end menu
4331
4332@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4333@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4334Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4335parentheses. The following types are defined:
4336
4337@table @code
4338@item NOLOAD
4339The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4340loaded into memory when the program is run.
4341@item DSECT
4342@itemx COPY
4343@itemx INFO
4344@itemx OVERLAY
4345These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4346rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4347marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4348section when the program is run.
4349@end table
4350
4351@kindex NOLOAD
4352@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4353@cindex loading, preventing
4354The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4355the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4356the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4357@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4358need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4359@smallexample
4360@group
4361SECTIONS @{
4362 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4363 @dots{}
4364@}
4365@end group
4366@end smallexample
4367
4368@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4369@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4370@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4371@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4372@cindex load address
4373@cindex section load address
4374Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4375@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4376@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4377specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4378address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4379
ea5cae92
NC
4380The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4381specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4382takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4383load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4384region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4385
4386If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4387section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4388load address:
4389
4390@itemize @bullet
4391@item
4392If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4393the LMA address as well.
4394
4395@item
4396If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4397
4398@item
4399Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4400with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4401section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4402VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4403the last section in the located region.
4404
4405@item
4406If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4407that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4408
4409@item
4410If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4411section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4412@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4413
4414@cindex ROM initialized data
4415@cindex initialized data in ROM
4416This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4417example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4418called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4419@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4420even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4421uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4422defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4423counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4424
4425@smallexample
4426@group
4427SECTIONS
4428 @{
4429 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4430 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4431 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4432 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4433 .bss 0x3000 :
4434 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4435@}
4436@end group
4437@end smallexample
4438
4439The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4440this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4441the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4442how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4443script.
4444
4445@smallexample
4446@group
4447extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4448char *src = &_etext;
4449char *dst = &_data;
4450
ea5cae92
NC
4451/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4452while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4453 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4454
ea5cae92 4455/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4456for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4457 *dst = 0;
4458@end group
4459@end smallexample
4460
bbf115d3
L
4461@node Forced Output Alignment
4462@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4463@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4464@cindex forcing output section alignment
4465@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4466You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4467
7e7d5768
AM
4468@node Forced Input Alignment
4469@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4470@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4471@cindex forcing input section alignment
4472@cindex input section alignment
4473You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4474SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4475sections, whether larger or smaller.
4476
0c71d759
NC
4477@node Output Section Constraint
4478@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4479@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4480@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4481@cindex constraints on output sections
4482You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4483of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4484read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4485@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4486
252b5132 4487@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4488@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4489@kindex >@var{region}
4490@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4491@cindex memory regions and sections
4492You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4493using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4494
4495Here is a simple example:
4496@smallexample
4497@group
4498MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4499SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4500@end group
4501@end smallexample
4502
4503@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4504@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4505@kindex :@var{phdr}
4506@cindex section, assigning to program header
4507@cindex program headers and sections
4508You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4509using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4510one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4511assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4512@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4513linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4514
4515Here is a simple example:
4516@smallexample
4517@group
4518PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4519SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4520@end group
4521@end smallexample
4522
4523@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4524@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4525@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4526@cindex section fill pattern
4527@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4528You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4529@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4530(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4531within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4532alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4533necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4534of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4535an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4536fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4537other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4538pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4539expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4540
4541You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4542output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4543
4544Here is a simple example:
4545@smallexample
4546@group
563e308f 4547SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4548@end group
4549@end smallexample
4550
4551@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4552@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4553@kindex OVERLAY
4554@cindex overlays
4555An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4556are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4557the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4558copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4559required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4560can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4561than another.
4562
4563Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4564@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4565output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4566command is as follows:
4567@smallexample
4568@group
4569OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4570 @{
4571 @var{secname1}
4572 @{
4573 @var{output-section-command}
4574 @var{output-section-command}
4575 @dots{}
4576 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4577 @var{secname2}
4578 @{
4579 @var{output-section-command}
4580 @var{output-section-command}
4581 @dots{}
4582 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4583 @dots{}
4584 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4585@end group
4586@end smallexample
4587
4588Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4589section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4590section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4591those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4592except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4593sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4594
4595The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4596addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4597memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4598whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4599and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4600and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4601
4602If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4603among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4604all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4605section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4606NOCROSSREFS}.
4607
4608For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4609provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4610defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4611@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4612the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4613within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4614symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4615
4616At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4617the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4618
4619Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4620@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4621@smallexample
4622@group
4623 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4624 @{
4625 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4626 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4627 @}
4628@end group
4629@end smallexample
4630@noindent
4631This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4632address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4633@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4634following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4635@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4636@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4637
4638C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4639like the following.
4640
4641@smallexample
4642@group
4643 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4644 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4645 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4646@end group
4647@end smallexample
4648
4649Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4650everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4651example could have been written identically as follows.
4652
4653@smallexample
4654@group
4655 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4656 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4657 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4658 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4659 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4660 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4661 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4662@end group
4663@end smallexample
4664
4665@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4666@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4667@kindex MEMORY
4668@cindex memory regions
4669@cindex regions of memory
4670@cindex allocating memory
4671@cindex discontinuous memory
4672The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4673memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4674
4675The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4676memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4677may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4678can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4679set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4680regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4681around to fit into the available regions.
4682
4683A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4684command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4685you wish. The syntax is:
4686@smallexample
4687@group
a1ab1d2a 4688MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4689 @{
4690 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4691 @dots{}
4692 @}
4693@end group
4694@end smallexample
4695
4696The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4697region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4698Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4699with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4700must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4701add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4702command.
252b5132
RH
4703
4704@cindex memory region attributes
4705The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4706whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4707not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4708@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4709section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4710the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4711them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4712
4713The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4714@table @samp
4715@item R
4716Read-only section
4717@item W
4718Read/write section
4719@item X
4720Executable section
4721@item A
4722Allocatable section
4723@item I
4724Initialized section
4725@item L
4726Same as @samp{I}
4727@item !
c09e9a8c 4728Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4729@end table
4730
4731If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4732@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4733attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4734in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4735attributes.
4736
4737@kindex ORIGIN =
4738@kindex o =
4739@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4740The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4741the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4742cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4743abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4744@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4745
4746@kindex LENGTH =
4747@kindex len =
4748@kindex l =
4749The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4750region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4751be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4752@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4753
4754In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4755available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4756and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4757linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4758is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4759or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4760explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4761region.
4762
4763@smallexample
4764@group
a1ab1d2a 4765MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4766 @{
4767 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4768 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4769 @}
4770@end group
4771@end smallexample
4772
4773Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4774specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4775@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4776a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4777output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4778was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4779the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4780output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4781region, the linker will issue an error message.
4782
3ec57632 4783It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4784expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4785@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4786
4787@smallexample
4788@group
c0065db7 4789 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4790@end group
4791@end smallexample
4792
252b5132
RH
4793@node PHDRS
4794@section PHDRS Command
4795@kindex PHDRS
4796@cindex program headers
4797@cindex ELF program headers
4798@cindex program segments
4799@cindex segments, ELF
4800The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4801@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4802loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4803program with the @samp{-p} option.
4804
4805When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4806reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4807program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4808This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4809interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4810
4811The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4812in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4813precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4814the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4815not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4816
4817The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4818generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4819ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4820
4821This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4822@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4823
4824@smallexample
4825@group
4826PHDRS
4827@{
4828 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4829 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4830@}
4831@end group
4832@end smallexample
4833
4834The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4835of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4836header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4837with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4838must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4839is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4840
4841Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4842system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4843specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4844sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4845attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4846Section Phdr}.
4847
4848It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4849merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4850repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4851contain the section.
4852
4853If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4854then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4855not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4856convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4857placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4858default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4859segment at all.
4860
4861@kindex FILEHDR
4862@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4863You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4864the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4865The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4866file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4867include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4868segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4869these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4870
4871The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4872value of the keyword.
4873
4874@table @asis
4875@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4876Indicates an unused program header.
4877
4878@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4879Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4880the file.
4881
4882@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4883Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4884
4885@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4886Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4887found.
4888
4889@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4890Indicates a segment holding note information.
4891
4892@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4893A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4894ABI.
4895
4896@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4897Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4898
4899@item @var{expression}
4900An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4901be used for types not defined above.
4902@end table
4903
4904You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4905in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4906@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4907Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4908output section attribute.
4909
4910The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4911which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4912explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4913an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4914header.
4915
4916Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4917headers used on a native ELF system.
4918
4919@example
4920@group
4921PHDRS
4922@{
4923 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4924 interp PT_INTERP ;
4925 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4926 data PT_LOAD ;
4927 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4928@}
4929
4930SECTIONS
4931@{
4932 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4933 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4934 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4935 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4936 @dots{}
4937 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4938 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4939 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4940 @dots{}
4941@}
4942@end group
4943@end example
4944
4945@node VERSION
4946@section VERSION Command
4947@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4948@cindex symbol versions
4949@cindex version script
4950@cindex versions of symbols
4951The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4952only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4953symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4954a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4955shared library.
4956
4957You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4958you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4959also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4960
4961The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4962@smallexample
4963VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4964@end smallexample
4965
4966The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4967Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4968version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4969version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4970version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4971scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4972library.
4973
4974The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4975examples.
4976
4977@smallexample
4978VERS_1.1 @{
4979 global:
4980 foo1;
4981 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4982 old*;
4983 original*;
4984 new*;
252b5132
RH
4985@};
4986
4987VERS_1.2 @{
4988 foo2;
4989@} VERS_1.1;
4990
4991VERS_2.0 @{
4992 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4993 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4994 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4995 "f(int, double)";
4996 @};
252b5132
RH
4997@} VERS_1.2;
4998@end smallexample
4999
5000This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5001version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5002The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5003a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5004of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5005symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5006is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5007in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5008However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5009name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5010
5011Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5012depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5013to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5014
5015Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5016depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5017and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5018
5019When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5020specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5021unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5022unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5023somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5024wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5025wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5026set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5027ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5028
5029The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5030they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5031could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5032However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5033
0f6bf451 5034Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5035in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5036symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5037won't.
5038
5039@smallexample
7c9c73be 5040@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5041@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5042
252b5132
RH
5043When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5044symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5045requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5046shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5047loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5048linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5049application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5050way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5051all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5052search for each symbol reference.
5053
5054The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5055doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5056that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5057functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5058the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5059required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5060that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5061versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5062the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5063
5064There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5065first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5066source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5067script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5068maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5069@smallexample
5070__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5071@end smallexample
5072@noindent
5073in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5074be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5075The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5076@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5077takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5078
5079The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5080function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5081an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5082version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5083linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5084
5085To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5086source file. Here is an example:
5087
5088@smallexample
5089__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5090__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5091__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5092__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5093@end smallexample
5094
5095In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5096unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5097example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5098@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5099
5100When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5101some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5102this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5103@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5104declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5105you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5106
5107If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5108within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5109(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5110specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5111
cb840a31
L
5112You can also specify the language in the version script:
5113
5114@smallexample
5115VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5116@end smallexample
5117
c0065db7 5118The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5119The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5120demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5121patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5122@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5123
86043bbb
MM
5124Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5125described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5126or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5127the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5128whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5129cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5130might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5131should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5132expect when you upgrade.
5133
252b5132
RH
5134@node Expressions
5135@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5136@cindex expressions
5137@cindex arithmetic
5138The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5139that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5140expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5141host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5142
5143You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5144
5145The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5146expressions.
5147
5148@menu
5149* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5150* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5151* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5152* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5153* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5154* Operators:: Operators
5155* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5156* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5157* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5158@end menu
5159
5160@node Constants
5161@subsection Constants
5162@cindex integer notation
5163@cindex constants in linker scripts
5164All constants are integers.
5165
5166As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5167octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5168hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5169@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5170@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5171value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5172
5173@cindex scaled integers
5174@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5175@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5176@cindex suffixes for integers
5177@cindex integer suffixes
5178In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5179constant by
5180@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5181@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5182@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5183@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5184@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5186@tex
5187${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5188@end tex
5189@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5190respectively. For example, the following
5191all refer to the same quantity:
5192
252b5132 5193@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5194_fourk_1 = 4K;
5195_fourk_2 = 4096;
5196_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5197_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5198@end smallexample
5199
8a308ae8
NC
5200Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5201conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5202
0c71d759
NC
5203@node Symbolic Constants
5204@subsection Symbolic Constants
5205@cindex symbolic constants
5206@kindex CONSTANT
5207It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5208the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5209
5210@table @code
5211@item MAXPAGESIZE
5212@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5213The target's maximum page size.
5214
5215@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5216@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5217The target's default page size.
5218@end table
5219
5220So for example:
5221
5222@smallexample
5223 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5224@end smallexample
5225
5226will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5227supported by the target.
5228
252b5132
RH
5229@node Symbols
5230@subsection Symbol Names
5231@cindex symbol names
5232@cindex names
5233@cindex quoted symbol names
5234@kindex "
5235Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5236and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5237Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5238specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5239keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5240@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5241"SECTION" = 9;
5242"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5243@end smallexample
5244
5245Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5246to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5247whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5248
ecca9871
L
5249@node Orphan Sections
5250@subsection Orphan Sections
5251@cindex orphan
5252Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5253are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5254script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5255output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5256placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5257attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5258same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5259If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5260at the end of the file.
5261
5262For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5263well as section flag.
5264
41911f68 5265If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5266the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5267__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5268section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5269orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5270representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5271character.
5272
252b5132
RH
5273@node Location Counter
5274@subsection The Location Counter
5275@kindex .
5276@cindex dot
5277@cindex location counter
5278@cindex current output location
5279The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5280current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5281location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5282within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5283anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5284
5285@cindex holes
5286Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5287moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5288location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5289and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5290doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5291
5292@smallexample
5293SECTIONS
5294@{
5295 output :
5296 @{
5297 file1(.text)
5298 . = . + 1000;
5299 file2(.text)
5300 . += 1000;
5301 file3(.text)
563e308f 5302 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5303@}
5304@end smallexample
5305@noindent
5306In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5307located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5308followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5309@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5310@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5311specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5312
5c6bbab8
NC
5313@cindex dot inside sections
5314Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5315current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5316statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5317absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5318however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5319not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5320
5321@smallexample
5322SECTIONS
5323@{
5324 . = 0x100
5325 .text: @{
5326 *(.text)
5327 . = 0x200
5328 @}
5329 . = 0x500
5330 .data: @{
5331 *(.data)
5332 . += 0x600
5333 @}
5334@}
5335@end smallexample
5336
5337The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5338and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5339the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5340much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5341move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5342and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5343the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5344the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5345
b5666f2f
AM
5346@cindex dot outside sections
5347Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5348output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5349needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5350
5351@smallexample
5352SECTIONS
5353@{
5354 start_of_text = . ;
5355 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5356 end_of_text = . ;
5357
5358 start_of_data = . ;
5359 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5360 end_of_data = . ;
5361@}
5362@end smallexample
5363
5364If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5365not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5366between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5367should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5368blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5369the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5370sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5371statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5372special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5373place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5374as follows:
5375
5376@smallexample
5377SECTIONS
5378@{
5379 start_of_text = . ;
5380 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5381 end_of_text = . ;
5382
5383 start_of_data = . ;
5384 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5385 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5386 end_of_data = . ;
5387@}
5388@end smallexample
5389
5390This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5391@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5392placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5393assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5394a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5395section. So you could write:
5396
5397@smallexample
5398SECTIONS
5399@{
5400 start_of_text = . ;
5401 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5402 end_of_text = . ;
5403
5404 . = . ;
5405 start_of_data = . ;
5406 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5407 end_of_data = . ;
5408@}
5409@end smallexample
5410
5411Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5412@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5413
252b5132
RH
5414@need 2000
5415@node Operators
5416@subsection Operators
5417@cindex operators for arithmetic
5418@cindex arithmetic operators
5419@cindex precedence in expressions
5420The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5421the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5422@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5423@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5424@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5425@smallexample
5426precedence associativity Operators Notes
5427(highest)
54281 left ! - ~ (1)
54292 left * / %
54303 left + -
54314 left >> <<
54325 left == != > < <= >=
54336 left &
54347 left |
54358 left &&
54369 left ||
543710 right ? :
543811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5439(lowest)
5440@end smallexample
5441Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5442(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5443(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5444@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5445@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5446@tex
5447\vskip \baselineskip
5448%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5449\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5450\hrule
5451\halign
5452{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5453height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5454&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5455height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5456\noalign{\hrule}
5457height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5458&highest&&&&&\cr
5459% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5460&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5461&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5462&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5463&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5464&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5465&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5466&7&&left&&|&\cr
5467&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5468&9&&left&&||&\cr
5469&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5470&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5471&lowest&&&&&\cr
5472height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5473\hrule}
5474@end tex
5475@iftex
5476{
5477@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5478@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5479@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5480}
5481@end iftex
5482@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5483
5484@node Evaluation
5485@subsection Evaluation
5486@cindex lazy evaluation
5487@cindex expression evaluation order
5488The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5489an expression when absolutely necessary.
5490
5491The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5492address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5493regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5494as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5495
5496However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5497until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5498other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5499for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5500
5501The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5502assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5503allocation.
5504
5505Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5506@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5507
5508If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5509available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5510following
5511@smallexample
5512@group
5513SECTIONS
5514 @{
a1ab1d2a 5515 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5516 @{ *(.text) @}
5517 @}
5518@end group
5519@end smallexample
5520@noindent
5521will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5522address}.
5523
5524@node Expression Section
5525@subsection The Section of an Expression
5526@cindex expression sections
5527@cindex absolute expressions
5528@cindex relative expressions
5529@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5530@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5531@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5532Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5533relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5534using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5535value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5536symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5537operations.
5538
abf4be64
AM
5539Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5540section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5541address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5542@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5543functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5544One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5545(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5546differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5547versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5548section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5549Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5550absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5551given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5552everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5553
5554In the following simple example,
252b5132 5555
7542af2a
AM
5556@smallexample
5557@group
5558SECTIONS
5559 @{
5560 . = 0x100;
5561 __executable_start = 0x100;
5562 .data :
5563 @{
5564 . = 0x10;
5565 __data_start = 0x10;
5566 *(.data)
5567 @}
5568 @dots{}
5569 @}
5570@end group
5571@end smallexample
252b5132 5572
7542af2a
AM
5573both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5574address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5575@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5576section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5577
5c3049d2
AM
5578For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5579addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5580
5581@itemize @bullet
5582@item
5583Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5584relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5585and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5586@item
5587Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5588or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5589same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5590address before applying the operator.
5591@end itemize
5592
5593The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5594
5595@itemize @bullet
5596@item
5597An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5598@item
5599The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5600@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5601The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5602relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5603(after above conversions) is also a number.
5604@item
5605The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5606relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5607section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5608@item
5609The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5610conversions) is an absolute address.
5611@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5612
5613You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5614to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5615create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5616section @samp{.data}:
5617@smallexample
5618SECTIONS
5619 @{
5620 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5621 @}
5622@end smallexample
5623@noindent
5624If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5625@samp{.data} section.
5626
7542af2a
AM
5627Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5628particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5629
252b5132
RH
5630@node Builtin Functions
5631@subsection Builtin Functions
5632@cindex functions in expressions
5633The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5634use in linker script expressions.
5635
5636@table @code
5637@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5638@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5639@cindex expression, absolute
5640Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5641of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5642value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5643normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5644
5645@item ADDR(@var{section})
5646@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5647@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5648Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5649script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5650the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5651@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5652@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5653the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5654@smallexample
5655@group
5656SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5657 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5658 @{
252b5132
RH
5659 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5660 @dots{}
5661 @}
5662 .output :
5663 @{
5664 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5665 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5666 @}
5667@dots{} @}
5668@end group
5669@end smallexample
5670
876f4090
NS
5671@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5672@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5673@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5674@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5675@cindex round up location counter
5676@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5677@cindex round up expression
5678@cindex align expression
5679Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5680to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5681doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5682arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5683expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5684equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5685
5686Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5687next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5688variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5689input sections:
252b5132
RH
5690@smallexample
5691@group
5692SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5693 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5694 *(.data)
5695 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5696 @}
5697@dots{} @}
5698@end group
5699@end smallexample
5700@noindent
5701The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5702a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5703a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5704of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5705
5706The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5707
362c1d1a
NS
5708@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5709@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5710@cindex section alignment
5711Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5712been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5713evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5714the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5715value in that section.
5716@smallexample
5717@group
5718SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5719 .output @{
5720 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5721 @dots{}
5722 @}
5723@dots{} @}
5724@end group
5725@end smallexample
5726
252b5132
RH
5727@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5728@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5729This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5730scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5731section.
5732
2d20f7bf
JJ
5733@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5734@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5735This is equivalent to either
5736@smallexample
5737(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5738@end smallexample
5739or
5740@smallexample
5741(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5742@end smallexample
5743@noindent
5744depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5745for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5746@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5747If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5748memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5749bytes in the on-disk file.
5750
5751This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5752any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5753@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5754be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5755working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5756
5757@noindent
5758Example:
5759@smallexample
5760 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5761@end smallexample
5762
5763@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5764@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5765This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5766evaluation purposes.
5767
5768@smallexample
5769 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5770@end smallexample
5771
a4f5ad88
JJ
5772@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5773@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5774This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5775@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5776When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5777does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5778@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5779boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5780it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5781@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5782
5783@smallexample
5784 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5785@end smallexample
5786
252b5132
RH
5787@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5788@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5789@cindex symbol defaults
5790Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5791defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5792return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5793default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5794shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5795the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5796existed, its value is preserved:
5797
5798@smallexample
5799@group
5800SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5801 .text : @{
5802 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5803 @dots{}
5804 @}
5805 @dots{}
5806@}
5807@end group
5808@end smallexample
5809
3ec57632
NC
5810@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5811@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5812Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5813
252b5132
RH
5814@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5815@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5816@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5817Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5818Section LMA}).
5819
5820@kindex MAX
5821@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5822Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5823
5824@kindex MIN
5825@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5826Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5827
5828@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5829@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5830@cindex unallocated address, next
5831Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5832This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5833use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5834output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5835
3ec57632
NC
5836@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5837@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5838Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5839
ba916c8a
MM
5840@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5841@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5842Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5843value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5844option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5845@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5846be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5847``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5848name.
5849
252b5132
RH
5850@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5851@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5852@cindex section size
5853Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5854been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5855evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5856@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5857@smallexample
5858@group
5859SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5860 .output @{
5861 .start = . ;
5862 @dots{}
5863 .end = . ;
5864 @}
5865 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5866 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5867@dots{} @}
5868@end group
5869@end smallexample
5870
5871@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5872@itemx sizeof_headers
5873@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5874@cindex header size
5875Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5876information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5877this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5878choose, to facilitate paging.
5879
5880@cindex not enough room for program headers
5881@cindex program headers, not enough room
5882When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5883@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5884number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5885addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5886additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5887room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5888the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5889script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5890you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5891command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5892@end table
5893
5894@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5895@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5896@cindex implicit linker scripts
5897If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5898an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5899linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5900linker will report an error.
5901
5902An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5903
5904Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5905assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5906commands.
5907
5908Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5909at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5910read. This can affect archive searching.
5911
5912@ifset GENERIC
5913@node Machine Dependent
5914@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5915
5916@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5917@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5918sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5919functionality are not listed.
5920
5921@menu
36f63dca
NC
5922@ifset H8300
5923* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5924@end ifset
5925@ifset I960
5926* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5927@end ifset
5928@ifset ARM
5929* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5930@end ifset
5931@ifset HPPA
5932* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5933@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5934@ifset M68K
5935* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5936@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5937@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5938* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5939@end ifset
2469cfa2 5940@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5941* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5942@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5943@ifset M68HC11
5944* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5945@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5946@ifset POWERPC
5947* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5948@end ifset
5949@ifset POWERPC64
5950* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5951@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5952@ifset SPU
5953* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5954@end ifset
74459f0e 5955@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5956* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5957@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5958@ifset WIN32
5959* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5960@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5961@ifset XTENSA
5962* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5963@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5964@end menu
5965@end ifset
5966
252b5132
RH
5967@ifset H8300
5968@ifclear GENERIC
5969@raisesections
5970@end ifclear
5971
5972@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5973@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5974
5975@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5976For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5977you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5978
5979@table @emph
5980@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5981@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5982@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5983targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5984program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5985respectively.
5986
5987@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5988@item synthesizing instructions
5989@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5990@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5991sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5992page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5993(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5994@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5995top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5996
5997@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5998@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5999biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6000which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6001page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6002(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6003@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6004the top page of memory).
6005
6006@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6007@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
600832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6009changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6010(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6011@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6012the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6013@end table
6014
6015@ifclear GENERIC
6016@lowersections
6017@end ifclear
6018@end ifset
6019
36f63dca 6020@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6021@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6022@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6023@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6024@node Renesas
6025@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6026
c2dcd04e
NC
6027@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6028H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6029options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6030@end ifset
6031@end ifclear
6032
6033@ifset I960
6034@ifclear GENERIC
6035@raisesections
6036@end ifclear
6037
6038@node i960
6039@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6040
6041@cindex i960 support
6042
6043You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6044specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6045family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6046incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6047linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6048libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6049search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6050
6051For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6052well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6053paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6054the names
6055
6056@smallexample
6057@group
6058try
6059libtry.a
6060tryca
6061libtryca.a
6062@end group
6063@end smallexample
6064
6065@noindent
6066The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6067two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6068
6069You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6070the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6071use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6072specifies a library.
6073
6074@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6075@cindex relaxing on i960
6076@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6077you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6078@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6079them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6080instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6081instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6082target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6083not itself call any subroutines).
6084
48229727
JB
6085@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6086@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6087@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6088The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6089
6090The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6091
85fdf906
AH
6092@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6093@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6094The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6095
36f63dca
NC
6096@ifclear GENERIC
6097@lowersections
6098@end ifclear
6099@end ifset
6100
6101@ifset ARM
6102@ifclear GENERIC
6103@raisesections
6104@end ifclear
6105
93fd0973
SC
6106@ifset M68HC11
6107@ifclear GENERIC
6108@raisesections
6109@end ifclear
6110
6111@node M68HC11/68HC12
6112@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6113
6114@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6115
6116@subsection Linker Relaxation
6117
6118For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6119optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6120
6121@table @emph
6122@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6123@item relaxing address modes
6124@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6125targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6126program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6127respectively.
6128
6129@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6130transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6131page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6132
6133@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6134When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6135of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6136addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6137@code{bset} instructions.
6138
6139@end table
6140
6141@subsection Trampoline Generation
6142
6143@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6144@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6145For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6146call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6147will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6148trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6149case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6150point to the function trampoline.
6151
6152@ifclear GENERIC
6153@lowersections
6154@end ifclear
6155@end ifset
6156
36f63dca 6157@node ARM
3674e28a 6158@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6159
6160@cindex ARM interworking support
6161@kindex --support-old-code
6162For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6163between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6164been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6165line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6166libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6167option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6168given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6169which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6170the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6171non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6172
6173@cindex thumb entry point
6174@cindex entry point, thumb
6175@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6176The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6177@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6178But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6179branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6180executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6181
ce11ba6c
KT
6182@cindex PE import table prefixing
6183@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6184The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6185the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6186elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6187import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6188
e489d0ae
PB
6189@cindex BE8
6190@kindex --be8
6191The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6192executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6193The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6194
3674e28a
PB
6195@cindex TARGET1
6196@kindex --target1-rel
6197@kindex --target1-abs
6198The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6199@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6200or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6201and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6202
6203@cindex TARGET2
6204@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6205The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6206@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6207meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6208@table @samp
6209@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6210@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6211@item abs
6212@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6213@item got-rel
6214@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6215@end table
6216
319850b4
JB
6217@cindex FIX_V4BX
6218@kindex --fix-v4bx
6219The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6220specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6221interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6222also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6223
6224In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6225linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6226@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6227
6228In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6229relocations are ignored.
6230
845b51d6
PB
6231@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6232@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6233Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6234relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6235
6236@smallexample
6237TST rM, #1
6238MOVEQ PC, rM
6239BX Rn
6240@end smallexample
6241
6242This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6243and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6244condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6245
33bfe774
JB
6246@cindex USE_BLX
6247@kindex --use-blx
6248The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6249BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6250situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6251code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6252each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6253
6254This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6255specify it if you are using that target.
6256
c6dd86c6
JB
6257@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6258@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6259The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6260bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6261instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6262to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6263the support code can read the intended values.
6264
6265The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6266intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6267and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6268intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6269full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6270you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6271
6272If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6273enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6274@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6275mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6276vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6277@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6278
6279If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6280potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6281such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6282first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6283instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6284the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6285are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6286
bf21ed78
MS
6287@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6288@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6289The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6290warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6291enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6292linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6293using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6294not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6295
6296@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6297@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6298The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6299warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6300@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6301linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6302using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6303
726150b7
NC
6304@cindex PIC_VENEER
6305@kindex --pic-veneer
6306The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6307ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6308is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6309@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6310
6311@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6312@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6313The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6314code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6315perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6316placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6317controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6318The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6319duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6320group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6321code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6322where they should be placed.
6323
6324The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6325@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6326placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6327branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6328placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6329value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6330exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6331A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6332linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6333from the input sections.
6334
6335The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6336@samp{N = +1}.
6337
1a51c1a4
NC
6338Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6339only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6340otherwise.
6341
36f63dca
NC
6342@ifclear GENERIC
6343@lowersections
6344@end ifclear
6345@end ifset
6346
6347@ifset HPPA
6348@ifclear GENERIC
6349@raisesections
6350@end ifclear
6351
6352@node HPPA ELF32
6353@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6354@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6355@kindex --multi-subspace
6356When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6357import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6358The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6359stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6360multiple sub-spaces.
6361
6362@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6363@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6364Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6365stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6366@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6367sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6368a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6369the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6370conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6371prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6372A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6373branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6374@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6375@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6376detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6377positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6378
6379Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6380single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6381create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6382large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6383
6384@ifclear GENERIC
6385@lowersections
6386@end ifclear
6387@end ifset
6388
7fb9f789
NC
6389@ifset M68K
6390@ifclear GENERIC
6391@raisesections
6392@end ifclear
6393
6394@node M68K
6395@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6396
6397@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6398@kindex --got=@var{type}
6399The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6400The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6401@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6402the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6403@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6404entries only at non-negative offsets.
6405@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6406entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6407support such GOTs.
6408@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6409output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6410file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6411files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6412
6413@ifclear GENERIC
6414@lowersections
6415@end ifclear
6416@end ifset
6417
36f63dca
NC
6418@ifset MMIX
6419@ifclear GENERIC
6420@raisesections
6421@end ifclear
6422
6423@node MMIX
6424@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6425For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6426@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6427understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6428can translate between the two formats.
6429
6430There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6431Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6432registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6433equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6434@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6435global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6436this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6437symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6438
7a2de473
HPN
6439Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6440@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6441The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6442of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6443
6444Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6445are left out from an mmo file.
6446
6447@ifclear GENERIC
6448@lowersections
6449@end ifclear
6450@end ifset
6451
6452@ifset MSP430
6453@ifclear GENERIC
6454@raisesections
6455@end ifclear
6456
6457@node MSP430
6458@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6459For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6460will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6461just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6462
6463@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6464The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6465
6466@table @code
6467@item @samp{.vectors}
6468Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6469
6470@item @samp{.bootloader}
6471Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6472in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6473
6474@item @samp{.infomem}
6475Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6476this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6477
c0065db7 6478@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6479This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6480in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6481
6482@item @samp{.noinit}
6483Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6484
c0065db7 6485The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6486@end table
6487
6488@ifclear GENERIC
6489@lowersections
6490@end ifclear
6491@end ifset
6492
2a60a7a8
AM
6493@ifset POWERPC
6494@ifclear GENERIC
6495@raisesections
6496@end ifclear
6497
6498@node PowerPC ELF32
6499@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6500@cindex PowerPC long branches
6501@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6502Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6503displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6504@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6505@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6506the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6507section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6508section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6509@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6510both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6511considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6512
6513@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6514@table @option
6515@cindex PowerPC PLT
6516@kindex --bss-plt
6517@item --bss-plt
6518Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6519generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6520the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6521writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6522@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6523PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6524compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6525BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6526
016687f8
AM
6527@kindex --secure-plt
6528@item --secure-plt
6529@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6530@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6531when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6532layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6533style BSS PLT.
6534
2a60a7a8
AM
6535@cindex PowerPC GOT
6536@kindex --sdata-got
6537@item --sdata-got
6538The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6539sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6540@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6541section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6542@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6543@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6544@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6545@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6546PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6547pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6548GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6549really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6550
6551@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6552@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6553@item --emit-stub-syms
6554This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6555symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6556
6557@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6558@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6559@item --no-tls-optimize
6560PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6561sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6562disable the optimization.
6563@end table
6564
6565@ifclear GENERIC
6566@lowersections
6567@end ifclear
6568@end ifset
6569
6570@ifset POWERPC64
6571@ifclear GENERIC
6572@raisesections
6573@end ifclear
6574
6575@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6576@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6577
6578@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6579@table @option
6580@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6581@kindex --stub-group-size
6582@item --stub-group-size
6583Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6584by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6585@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6586sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6587a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6588the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6589conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6590prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6591A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6592branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6593@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6594@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6595detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6596positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6597
6598Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6599single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6600create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6601large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6602
6603@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6604@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6605@item --emit-stub-syms
6606This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6607symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6608
6609@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6610@kindex --dotsyms
6611@kindex --no-dotsyms
6612@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6613These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6614in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6615function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6616code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6617properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6618to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6619@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6620dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6621feature.
6622
6623@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6624@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6625@item --no-tls-optimize
6626PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6627sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6628disable the optimization.
6629
6630@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6631@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6632@item --no-opd-optimize
6633PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6634corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6635the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6636Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6637
6638@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6639@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6640@item --non-overlapping-opd
6641Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6642@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6643the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6644entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6645
6646@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6647@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6648@item --no-toc-optimize
6649PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6650entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6651reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6652marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6653marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6654relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6655unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6656reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6657discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6658reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6659code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6660optimization.
6661
6662@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6663@kindex --no-multi-toc
6664@item --no-multi-toc
6665By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6666entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6667total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6668grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6669TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6670calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6671help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
667264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6673Use this option to turn off this feature.
6674@end table
6675
6676@ifclear GENERIC
6677@lowersections
6678@end ifclear
6679@end ifset
6680
49fa1e15
AM
6681@ifset SPU
6682@ifclear GENERIC
6683@raisesections
6684@end ifclear
6685
6686@node SPU ELF
6687@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6688
6689@cindex SPU ELF options
6690@table @option
6691
6692@cindex SPU plugins
6693@kindex --plugin
6694@item --plugin
6695This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6696
6697@cindex SPU overlays
6698@kindex --no-overlays
6699@item --no-overlays
6700Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6701regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6702@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6703turns off all this special overlay handling.
6704
6705@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6706@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6707@item --emit-stub-syms
6708This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6709symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6710
6711@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6712@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6713@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6714This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6715function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6716on calls to non-overlay regions.
6717
6718@cindex SPU local store size
6719@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6720@item --local-store=lo:hi
6721@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6722the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6723range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6724
c0065db7 6725@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6726@kindex --stack-analysis
6727@item --stack-analysis
6728SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6729unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6730under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6731@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6732@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6733determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6734for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6735for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6736for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6737find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6738and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6739under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6740dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6741is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6742and calls will be given.
6743
c0065db7 6744@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6745@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6746@item --emit-stack-syms
6747This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6748in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6749These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6750functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6751functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6752such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6753The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6754@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6755@end table
6756
6757@ifclear GENERIC
6758@lowersections
6759@end ifclear
6760@end ifset
6761
36f63dca
NC
6762@ifset TICOFF
6763@ifclear GENERIC
6764@raisesections
6765@end ifclear
6766
6767@node TI COFF
6768@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6769@cindex TI COFF versions
6770@kindex --format=@var{version}
6771The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6772TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6773also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6774format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6775header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6776
6777@ifclear GENERIC
6778@lowersections
6779@end ifclear
6780@end ifset
6781
2ca22b03
NC
6782@ifset WIN32
6783@ifclear GENERIC
6784@raisesections
6785@end ifclear
6786
6787@node WIN32
6788@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6789
c0065db7 6790This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6791See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6792command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6793
6794@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6795@cindex import libraries
6796@item import libraries
69da35b5 6797The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6798libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6799regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6800archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6801support for creating such libraries provided with the
6802@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6803
c0065db7
RM
6804@item exporting DLL symbols
6805@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6806The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6807
6808@table @emph
6809@item using auto-export functionality
6810@cindex using auto-export functionality
6811By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6812which is controlled by the following command line options:
6813
0a5d968e
NC
6814@itemize
6815@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6816@item --exclude-symbols
6817@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6818@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6819@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6820@end itemize
6821
09e2aba4
DK
6822When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6823(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6824symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6825often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6826private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6827options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6828exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6829final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6830
6831If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6832command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6833if either of the following are true:
6834
6835@itemize
6836@item A DEF file is used.
6837@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6838@end itemize
dc8465bf 6839
c0065db7
RM
6840@item using a DEF file
6841@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6842Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6843an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6844exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6845name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6846command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6847
6848@example
6849gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6850@end example
6851
0a5d968e
NC
6852Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6853@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6854
dc8465bf
NC
6855Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6856
6857@example
4b5bd4e7 6858LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6859
6860EXPORTS
6861foo
6862bar
6863_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6864another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6865var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6866doo = foo == foo2
6867eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6868@end example
dc8465bf 6869
7fcab871 6870This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6871symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6872alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6873by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6874@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6875@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6876export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6877in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6878symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6879
6b31ad16
DS
6880The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6881name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6882the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6883
b45619c0
NC
6884When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6885library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6886@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6887executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6888
6889With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6890specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6891non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6892
6893If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6894or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6895filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6896
4b5bd4e7
DS
6897The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6898
6899@example
6900EXPORTS
6901 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6902 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6903 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6904@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6905
6906Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6907@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6908@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6909@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6910Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6911@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6912string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6913
6914The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6915
6916@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6917will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6918by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6919linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6920library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6921
6922@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6923The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6924the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6925@code{*_imp__foo}).
6926
6927@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6928well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6929read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6930variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6931the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6932extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6933application will behave unexpectedly.
6934
6935@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6936it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6937symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6938API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6939the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6940
4b5bd4e7
DS
6941See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6942other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6943
6944@cindex creating a DEF file
6945While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6946with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6947
6948@item Using decorations
6949@cindex Using decorations
6950Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6951itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6952declared as:
6953
6954@example
6955__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6956__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6957@end example
6958
6959All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6960any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6961this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6962the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6963
6964Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6965decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6966instead:
6967
6968@example
6969__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6970__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6971@end example
6972
c0065db7
RM
6973This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6974when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6975variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6976code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6977of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6978omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6979@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6980information.
c0065db7 6981@end table
dc8465bf 6982
2ca22b03
NC
6983@cindex automatic data imports
6984@item automatic data imports
6985The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6986by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6987compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6988issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6989code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6990c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6991initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6992decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6993platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6994command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6995The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6996suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6997trigger the feature's use.
6998
c0065db7 6999auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7000additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7001
c0065db7 7002"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7003documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7004
c0065db7
RM
7005The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7006occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7007One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7008below.
7009
7010@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7011For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7012object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7013offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7014field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7015in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7016without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7017The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7018references.
7019
c0065db7
RM
7020The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7021be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7022themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7023runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7024compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7025support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7026run without error on an older system.
7027
c0065db7
RM
7028@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7029enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7030
7031@cindex direct linking to a dll
7032@item direct linking to a dll
7033The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7034including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7035libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7036traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7037libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7038function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7039though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7040storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7041tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7042large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7043
c0065db7 7044Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7045@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7046of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7047perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7048select the dll instead of an import library.
7049
2ca22b03 7050
69da35b5
NC
7051For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7052to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7053
7054@example
45e948fe
NC
7055libxxx.dll.a
7056xxx.dll.a
7057libxxx.a
7058xxx.lib
69da35b5 7059cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7060libxxx.dll
7061xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7062@end example
7063
69da35b5
NC
7064before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7065
c0065db7
RM
7066(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7067where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7068@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7069file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7070@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7071
c0065db7
RM
7072Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7073@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7074was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7075various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7076could coexist on the same machine.
7077
2ca22b03
NC
7078The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7079applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7080libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7081
7082@example
7083bin/
7084 cygxxx.dll
7085lib/
7086 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7087 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7088@end example
7089
c0065db7
RM
7090Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7091done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7092
70931. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7094@example
7095gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7096@end example
2ca22b03 7097
69da35b5
NC
7098However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7099(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7100@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7101not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7102
2ca22b03
NC
71032. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7104directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7105should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7106making the app/dll.
7107
7108@example
7109ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7110@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7111
7112Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7113
7114@example
7115gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7116@end example
69da35b5
NC
7117
7118This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7119perfectly legal
7120
7121@example
7122bin/
7123 cygxxx-5.dll
7124lib/
c0065db7 7125 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7126@end example
7127
dc8465bf 7128Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7129even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7130@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7131
7132Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7133wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7134
71351. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7136work with auto-imported data.
7137
dc8465bf
NC
71382. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7139import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7140symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7141for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7142possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7143
45e948fe
NC
71443. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7145critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7146in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7147stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7148
69da35b5 7149So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7150true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7151a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7152binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7153massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7154requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7155will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7156
c0065db7 7157@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7158@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7159@item adding additional names
7160Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7161A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7162exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7163when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7164import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7165
c0065db7 7166@example
dc8465bf
NC
7167LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7168
7169EXPORTS
c0065db7 7170foo
dc8465bf 7171_foo = foo
c0065db7 7172@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7173
7174The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7175
7176Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7177source code using the "weak" attribute:
7178
c0065db7
RM
7179@example
7180void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7181void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7182@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7183
7184See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7185symbols.
7186
7187@item renaming symbols
7188Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7189kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7190@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7191DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7192created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7193
c0065db7 7194@example
dc8465bf
NC
7195LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7196
7197EXPORTS
7198_foo = foo
c0065db7 7199@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7200
7201The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7202@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7203@end table
dc8465bf 7204
0a5d968e 7205Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7206unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7207If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7208@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7209that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7210@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7211renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7212to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7213the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7214In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7215which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7216
7217@cindex weak externals
7218@item weak externals
7219The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7220weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7221defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7222are three variants of weak externals:
7223@itemize
7224@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7225called lazy externals.
7226@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7227This form is not presently implemented.
7228@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7229implemented.
7230@end itemize
7231As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7232are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7233uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7234
7235@cindex aligned common symbols
7236@item aligned common symbols
7237As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7238desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7239the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7240carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7241by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7242tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7243but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7244warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7245@end table
7246
7247@ifclear GENERIC
7248@lowersections
7249@end ifclear
7250@end ifset
7251
e0001a05
NC
7252@ifset XTENSA
7253@ifclear GENERIC
7254@raisesections
7255@end ifclear
7256
7257@node Xtensa
7258@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7259
7260@cindex Xtensa processors
7261The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7262@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7263specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7264keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7265example, with the command:
7266
7267@smallexample
7268SECTIONS
7269@{
7270 .text : @{
7271 *(.literal .text)
7272 @}
7273@}
7274@end smallexample
7275
7276@noindent
7277@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7278and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7279literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7280interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7281group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7282files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7283and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7284
43cd72b9 7285@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7286@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7287Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7288provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7289is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7290literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7291will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7292location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7293the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7294unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7295@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7296range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7297
7298For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7299to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7300instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7301instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7302instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7303@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7304hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7305By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7306switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7307density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7308instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7309performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7310linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7311a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7312
7313The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7314control the linker:
7315
7316@cindex Xtensa options
7317@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7318@item --size-opt
7319When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7320more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7321no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7322alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7323preserve the correctness of the code.
7324@end table
e0001a05
NC
7325
7326@ifclear GENERIC
7327@lowersections
7328@end ifclear
7329@end ifset
7330
252b5132
RH
7331@ifclear SingleFormat
7332@node BFD
7333@chapter BFD
7334
7335@cindex back end
7336@cindex object file management
7337@cindex object formats available
7338@kindex objdump -i
7339The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7340These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7341object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7342format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7343it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7344associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7345object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7346(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7347list all the formats available for your configuration.
7348
7349@cindex BFD requirements
7350@cindex requirements for BFD
7351As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7352several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7353BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7354formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7355been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7356BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7357may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7358
7359One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7360mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7361useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7362conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7363
7364@menu
7365* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7366@end menu
7367
7368@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7369@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7370@cindex opening object files
7371@include bfdsumm.texi
7372@end ifclear
7373
7374@node Reporting Bugs
7375@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7376@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7377@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7378
ff5dcc92 7379Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7380
7381Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7382it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7383to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7384work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7385@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7386
7387In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7388information that enables us to fix the bug.
7389
7390@menu
7391* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7392* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7393@end menu
7394
7395@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7396@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7397@cindex bug criteria
7398
7399If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7400
7401@itemize @bullet
7402@cindex fatal signal
7403@cindex linker crash
7404@cindex crash of linker
7405@item
7406If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7407@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7408
7409@cindex error on valid input
7410@item
ff5dcc92 7411If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7412
7413@cindex invalid input
7414@item
ff5dcc92 7415If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7416may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7417object files are correct.
7418
7419@item
7420If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7421improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7422@end itemize
7423
7424@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7425@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7426@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7427@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7428
7429A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7430products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7431recommend you contact that organization first.
7432
7433You can find contact information for many support companies and
7434individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7435distribution.
7436
ad22bfe8 7437@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7438Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7439@value{BUGURL}.
7440@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7441
7442The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7443@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7444fact or leave it out, state it!
7445
7446Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7447problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7448assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7449matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7450the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7451location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7452were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7453into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7454specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7455and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7456
7457Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7458the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7459on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7460
7461Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7462bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7463respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7464You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7465
7466To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7467
7468@itemize @bullet
7469@item
ff5dcc92 7470The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7471the @samp{--version} argument.
7472
7473Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7474the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7475
7476@item
ff5dcc92 7477Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7478patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7479
7480@item
7481The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7482version number.
7483
7484@item
ff5dcc92 7485What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7486``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7487
7488@item
7489The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7490observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7491list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7492sufficient.
7493
7494If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7495and then we might not encounter the bug.
7496
7497@item
7498A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7499bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7500provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7501bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7502state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7503requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7504we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7505attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7506
7507If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7508@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7509object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7510@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7511how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7512
7513@item
7514A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7515incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7516
ff5dcc92 7517Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7518will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7519not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7520a chance to make a mistake.
7521
7522Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7523say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7524copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7525C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7526and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7527fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7528you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7529any conclusion from our observations.
7530
7531@item
ff5dcc92 7532If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7533diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7534@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7535If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7536context, not by line number.
7537
7538The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7539sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7540@end itemize
7541
7542Here are some things that are not necessary:
7543
7544@itemize @bullet
7545@item
7546A description of the envelope of the bug.
7547
7548Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7549which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7550changes will not affect it.
7551
7552This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7553will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7554with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7555We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7556
7557Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7558of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7559output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7560less time, and so on.
7561
7562However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7563report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7564
7565@item
7566A patch for the bug.
7567
7568A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7569the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7570a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7571to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7572
ff5dcc92 7573Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7574construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7575through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7576able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7577fixed.
7578
7579And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7580patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7581help us to understand.
7582
7583@item
7584A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7585
7586Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7587things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7588@end itemize
7589
7590@node MRI
7591@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7592@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7593To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7594linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7595alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7596described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7597simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7598@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7599linker commands; these commands are described here.
7600
7601In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7602file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7603features to make use of them.
7604
7605You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7606@samp{-c} command-line option.
7607
7608Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7609command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7610blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7611MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7612issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7613
7614Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7615
7616You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7617lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7618The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7619
7620@table @code
7621@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7622@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7623@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7624Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7625the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7626@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7627your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7628script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7629commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7630input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7631@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7632
7633@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7634@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7635Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7636in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7637
7638@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7639
7640@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7641@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7642Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7643@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7644
7645@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7646@item BASE @var{expression}
7647Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7648absolute addresses) in the output file.
7649
7650@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7651@item CHIP @var{expression}
7652@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7653This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7654
7655@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7656@item END
7657This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7658
7659@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7660@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7661Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7662language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7663
7664@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7665@item
252b5132
RH
7666S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7667
7668@item
7669IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7670
7671@item
7672COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7673@samp{COFF}
7674@end enumerate
7675
7676@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7677@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7678Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7679@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7680
7681The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7682same line, with no change in its effect.
7683
7684@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7685@item LOAD @var{filename}
7686@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7687Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7688same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7689command line.
7690
7691@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7692@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7693@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7694MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7695option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7696
7697@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7698@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7699@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7700Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7701order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7702script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7703sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7704file, in the order specified.
7705
7706@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7707@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7708@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7709@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7710Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7711@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7712
7713@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7714@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7715@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7716@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7717You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7718specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7719If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7720@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7721@end table
7722
793c5807
NC
7723@node GNU Free Documentation License
7724@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7725@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7726
370b66a1
CD
7727@node LD Index
7728@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7729
7730@printindex cp
7731
7732@tex
7733% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7734% meantime:
7735\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7736\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7737\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7738\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7739\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7740\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7741\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7742\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7743\page\colophon
7744% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7745@end tex
7746
252b5132 7747@bye